blob: cc6035f1a2f11c1b68f5a82235d4698441e8cddd [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07007 *
8 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
9 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
10 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050016#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070017#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020022#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040024/**
25 * DOC: Introduction
26 *
27 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
28 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
29 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
30 * drivers.
31 */
32
33/**
34 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
35 *
36 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070037 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
38 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
39 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010040 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
41 * tasklet function.
42 *
43 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070044 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070045 */
46
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040047/**
48 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070049 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
51 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
52 */
53
54/**
55 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070056 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040057 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
58 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
59 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
60 * hardware.
61 *
62 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
63 *
64 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
65 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
66 *
67 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
68 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
69 *
70 * Finally, for received frames, the driver is able to indicate that it has
71 * filled a radiotap header and put that in front of the frame; if it does
72 * not do so then mac80211 may add this under certain circumstances.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070073 */
74
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020075/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040076 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 *
78 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 *
83 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84 * suspend.
85 *
86 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87 *
88 */
89
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050090struct device;
91
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040092/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020093 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
94 *
95 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010096 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020097 */
98enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020099 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100100 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200101};
102
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200103#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
104
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200105/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800106 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
108 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
109 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
110 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
111 */
112enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
113 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
114 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
115 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
116 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
117};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200118#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800119
120/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400121 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
122 *
123 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100124 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400125 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400126 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200127 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
128 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400129 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100130 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300131 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200132 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400133 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700134struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100136 u16 cw_min;
137 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200138 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300139 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200140 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700141};
142
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700143struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
144 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
145 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
146 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
147 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
148};
149
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100150/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200151 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200153 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200155 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
156 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200157 */
158enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200162 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200163};
164
165/**
166 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
167 *
168 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
169 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
170 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100171 * @def: the channel definition
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200183
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
185
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100186 bool radar_enabled;
187
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100188 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189};
190
191/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100192 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
193 *
194 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
195 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
196 *
197 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
198 * also implies a change in the AID.
199 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
200 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300201 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700202 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200203 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200204 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200205 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
206 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
207 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
208 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
209 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
210 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200211 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200212 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300213 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200214 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
215 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200216 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200217 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200218 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300219 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200220 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100221 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
222 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300223 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
224 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100225 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
226 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
227 * context had been assigned.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100228 */
229enum ieee80211_bss_change {
230 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
231 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
232 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300233 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200234 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200235 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200236 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200237 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
238 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
239 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200240 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200241 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300242 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200243 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200244 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300245 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200246 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300247 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200248 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100249 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300250 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100251 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200252
253 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100254};
255
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300256/*
257 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
258 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
259 * filtering will be disabled.
260 */
261#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
262
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100263/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700264 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
265 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
266 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
267 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
268 */
269enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
270 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
271 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
272};
273
274/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100275 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
276 *
277 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
278 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
279 *
280 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200281 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
282 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530283 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100284 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
285 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200286 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
287 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
288 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
289 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
290 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
291 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100292 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200293 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300294 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200295 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100296 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
297 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
298 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
299 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
300 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200301 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
302 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100303 * (see @sync_tsf)
304 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
305 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700306 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800307 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200308 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
309 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
310 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300311 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100312 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200313 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
314 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100315 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
316 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100317 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200318 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200319 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
320 * implies disabled
321 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300322 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
323 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
324 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
325 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100326 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
327 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
328 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200329 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200330 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
331 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
332 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300333 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
334 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200335 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300336 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
337 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200338 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100339 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100340 */
341struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200342 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100343 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200344 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530345 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100346 u16 aid;
347 /* erp related data */
348 bool use_cts_prot;
349 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300350 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200351 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800352 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700353 u16 beacon_int;
354 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200355 u64 sync_tsf;
356 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100357 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100358 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300359 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100360 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200361 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200362 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
363 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100364 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300365 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100366 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200367 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200368 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300369 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300370 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
371 size_t ssid_len;
372 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200373 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100374 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100375};
376
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800377/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200378 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800379 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700380 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800381 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100382 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200383 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
384 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
385 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
386 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
387 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
388 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
389 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
390 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
391 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
392 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
393 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200394 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200395 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
396 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200397 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200398 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
399 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200400 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200401 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200402 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
403 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
404 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
405 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
406 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
407 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
408 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
409 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200410 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
411 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
412 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300413 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
414 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200415 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
416 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
417 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600418 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
419 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
420 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100421 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
422 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
423 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200424 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
425 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200426 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
427 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100428 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
429 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
430 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200431 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
432 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
433 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
434 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100435 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
436 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
437 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100438 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
439 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
440 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200441 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
442 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
443 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400444 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200445 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
446 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100447 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
448 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
449 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
450 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200451 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
452 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
453 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530454 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
455 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
456 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200457 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
458 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
459 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200460 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
461 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530462 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
463 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
464 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200465 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
466 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
467 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200468 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
469 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200470 *
471 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
472 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800473 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200474enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200475 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200476 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
477 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
478 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
479 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
480 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
481 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
482 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
483 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
484 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
485 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
486 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
487 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600488 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100489 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200490 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200491 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100492 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200493 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100494 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100495 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200496 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400497 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200498 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100499 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200500 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530501 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200502 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530503 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200504 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200505 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200506};
507
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200508#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
509
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200510/**
511 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
512 *
513 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
514 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
515 *
516 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
517 */
518enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
520};
521
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200522/*
523 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
524 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
525 */
526#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
527 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
528 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
529 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
530 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200533 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200534
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530535/**
536 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
537 * Rate Control algorithm.
538 *
539 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
540 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
541 *
542 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
543 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
544 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
545 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
546 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100547 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
548 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530549 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
550 * Greenfield mode.
551 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100552 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
553 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
554 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530555 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
556 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
557 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
558 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
559 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200560enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
561 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
562 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
563 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
564
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100565 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200566 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
567 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
568 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
569 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
570 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100571 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
572 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
573 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800574};
575
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200576
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200577/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
578#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200579
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200580/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
581#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
582
583/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200584#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200585
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200586/* maximum number of rate table entries */
587#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
588
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200589/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200590 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200591 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200592 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
593 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200594 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200595 *
596 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
597 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
598 *
599 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
600 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200601 *
602 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
603 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
604 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
605 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
606 * information
607 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
608 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
609 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
610 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
611 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
612 * information should then contain
613 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
614 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
615 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200616 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200617struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
618 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100619 u16 count:5,
620 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000621} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200622
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100623#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
624
625static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
626 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
627{
628 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200629 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
630 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100631}
632
633static inline u8
634ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
635{
636 return rate->idx & 0xF;
637}
638
639static inline u8
640ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
641{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200642 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100643}
644
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200645/**
646 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200647 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200648 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
649 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
650 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
651 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
652 *
653 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200654 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200655 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100656 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700657 * @control: union for control data
658 * @status: union for status data
659 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100660 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700661 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100662 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700663 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200664 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200665 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200666struct ieee80211_tx_info {
667 /* common information */
668 u32 flags;
669 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200670
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200671 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100672
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100673 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100674
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200675 union {
676 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200677 union {
678 /* rate control */
679 struct {
680 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
681 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
682 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200683 u8 use_rts:1;
684 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200685 u8 short_preamble:1;
686 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200687 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200688 };
689 /* only needed before rate control */
690 unsigned long jiffies;
691 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200692 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
694 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200695 u32 flags;
696 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200697 } control;
698 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200699 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200700 int ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200701 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100702 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200703 u8 antenna;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200704 /* 21 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200705 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200706 struct {
707 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
708 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200709 u8 pad[4];
710
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200711 void *rate_driver_data[
712 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
713 };
714 void *driver_data[
715 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200716 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700717};
718
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300719/**
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -0700720 * struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies - scheduled scan IEs
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300721 *
722 * This structure is used to pass the appropriate IEs to be used in scheduled
723 * scans for all bands. It contains both the IEs passed from the userspace
724 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
725 *
726 * @ie: array with the IEs for each supported band
727 * @len: array with the total length of the IEs for each band
728 */
729struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies {
730 u8 *ie[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
731 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
732};
733
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200734static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
735{
736 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
737}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400738
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200739static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
740{
741 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
742}
743
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200744/**
745 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
746 *
747 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
748 *
749 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
750 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
751 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
752 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
753 *
754 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
755 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
756 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
757 */
758static inline void
759ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
760{
761 int i;
762
763 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
764 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
765 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
766 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
767 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
768 /* clear the rate counts */
769 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
770 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
771
772 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200773 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
775 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
776 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
777}
778
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400779
780/**
781 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
782 *
783 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
784 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
785 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
786 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400787 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
788 * verification has been done by the hardware.
789 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
790 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
791 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400792 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
793 * the frame.
794 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
795 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800796 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100797 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
798 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
799 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800800 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
801 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
802 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200803 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200804 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100805 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200806 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100807 * @RX_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
808 * @RX_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
809 * @RX_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200810 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100811 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
812 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200813 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
814 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
815 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200816 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
817 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
818 * each A-MPDU
819 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
820 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
821 * monitoring purposes only
822 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
823 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
824 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
825 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
826 * on this subframe
827 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
828 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200829 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200830 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
831 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400832 */
833enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200834 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
835 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
836 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
837 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
838 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
839 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800840 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200841 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
842 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
843 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
844 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
845 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
846 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
847 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
848 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
849 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
850 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
851 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
852 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
853 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800854 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100855 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
856 RX_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(23),
857 RX_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(24),
858 RX_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200859 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200860 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
861 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400862};
863
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200864#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
865
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400866/**
867 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
868 *
869 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
870 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200871 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200872 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900873 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
874 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200875 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
876 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100877 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400878 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200879 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
880 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
881 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200882 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
883 * values were filled.
884 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
885 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400886 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200887 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100888 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
889 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400890 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200891 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200892 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
893 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
894 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100895 * @vendor_radiotap_bitmap: radiotap vendor namespace presence bitmap
896 * @vendor_radiotap_len: radiotap vendor namespace length
897 * @vendor_radiotap_align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. Note
898 * that the actual data must be at the start of the SKB data
899 * already.
900 * @vendor_radiotap_oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
901 * @vendor_radiotap_subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400902 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700903struct ieee80211_rx_status {
904 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200905 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200906 u32 ampdu_reference;
907 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100908 u32 vendor_radiotap_bitmap;
909 u16 vendor_radiotap_len;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200910 u16 freq;
911 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100912 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200913 u8 rx_flags;
914 u8 band;
915 u8 antenna;
916 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200917 u8 chains;
918 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200919 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100920 u8 vendor_radiotap_align;
921 u8 vendor_radiotap_oui[3];
922 u8 vendor_radiotap_subns;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700923};
924
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400925/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400926 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
927 *
928 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
929 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100930 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
931 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
932 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +0200933 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
934 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
935 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
936 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
937 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
938 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
939 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200940 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
941 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
942 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
943 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
944 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200945 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
946 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400947 */
948enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100949 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +0200950 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200951 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200952 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400953};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700954
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200955
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700956/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200957 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
958 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200959 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100960 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200961 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200962 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +0100963 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +0200964 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200965 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100966 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200967 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
968 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200969 */
970enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100971 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200972 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100973 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200974 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200975 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
976 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
977 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200978 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200979};
980
981/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100982 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
983 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200984 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
985 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
986 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
987 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
988 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100989 */
990enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
991 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
992 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
993 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
994 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
995
996 /* keep last */
997 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
998};
999
1000/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001001 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1002 *
1003 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1004 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001005 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1006 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001007 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001008 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001009 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1010 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1011 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1012 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001013 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1014 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1015 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001016 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1017 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1018 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1019 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001020 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1021 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001022 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001023 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001024 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001025 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001026 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001027 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1028 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001029 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001030 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1031 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001032 *
1033 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1034 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001035 * configured for an HT channel.
1036 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1037 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001038 */
1039struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001040 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001041 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001042 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001043
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001044 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001045 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001046
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001047 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1048
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001049 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001050 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001051 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001052};
1053
1054/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001055 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1056 *
1057 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1058 * operation.
1059 *
1060 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1061 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1062 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1063 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1064 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1065 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001066 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001067 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1068 */
1069struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1070 u64 timestamp;
1071 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001072 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001073 u8 count;
1074};
1075
1076/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001077 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1078 *
1079 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1080 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001081 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1082 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1083 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1084 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001085 */
1086enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1087 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001088 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001089};
1090
1091/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001092 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1093 *
1094 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1095 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1096 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001097 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001098 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1099 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001100 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001101 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1102 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001103 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001104 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1105 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1106 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1107 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001108 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1109 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001110 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1111 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1112 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1113 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1114 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001115 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001116 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001117 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001118 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1119 * sizeof(void *).
1120 */
1121struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001122 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001123 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001124 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001125 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001126 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001127
1128 u8 cab_queue;
1129 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1130
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001131 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1132
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001133 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001134
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001135#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1136 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1137#endif
1138
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001139 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001140 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001141};
1142
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001143static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1144{
1145#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001146 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001147#endif
1148 return false;
1149}
1150
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001151/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001152 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1153 *
1154 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1155 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1156 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001157 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1158 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1159 * particular key.
1160 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1161 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1162 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001163 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1164 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001165 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001166 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1167 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001168 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001169 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001170 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1171 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001172 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1173 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1174 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1175 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1176 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1177 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1178 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001179 */
1180enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001181 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = 1<<1,
1182 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC= 1<<2,
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001183 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = 1<<3,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001184 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = 1<<4,
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001185 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = 1<<5,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001186 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001187};
1188
1189/**
1190 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1191 *
1192 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1193 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1194 *
1195 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1196 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001197 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001198 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001199 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1200 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1201 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001202 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1203 * data block:
1204 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1205 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1206 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001207 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1208 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001209 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001210struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001211 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001212 u8 icv_len;
1213 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001214 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001215 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001216 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001217 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001218 u8 key[0];
1219};
1220
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001221/**
1222 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1223 *
1224 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1225 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1226 *
1227 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1228 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1229 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001230enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001231 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001232};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001233
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001234/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001235 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1236 *
1237 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1238 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1239 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1240 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1241 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1242 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1243 */
1244enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1245 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1246 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1247 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1248 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1249 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1250 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1251};
1252
1253/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001254 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1255 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1256 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1257 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1258 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1259 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1260 *
1261 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1262 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1263 */
1264enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1265 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1266 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1267 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1268 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1269};
1270
1271/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001272 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1273 *
1274 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001275 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001276 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1277 */
1278struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1279 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1280 struct {
1281 s8 idx;
1282 u8 count;
1283 u8 count_cts;
1284 u8 count_rts;
1285 u16 flags;
1286 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1287};
1288
1289/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001290 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1291 *
1292 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1293 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1294 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1295 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1296 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001297 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001298 *
1299 * @addr: MAC address
1300 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001301 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001302 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1303 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001304 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports WME. Only valid during AP-mode.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001305 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1306 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001307 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1308 * if wme is supported.
1309 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001310 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001311 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1312 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1313 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1314 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001315 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001316 * @rates: rate control selection table
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001317 */
1318struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001319 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001320 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1321 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001322 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001323 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001324 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001325 u8 uapsd_queues;
1326 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001327 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001328 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001329 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001330 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001331
1332 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001333 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001334};
1335
1336/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001337 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1338 *
1339 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301340 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001341 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001342 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1343 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1344 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001345enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001346 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1347};
1348
1349/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001350 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1351 *
1352 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1353 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1354 */
1355struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1356 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1357};
1358
1359/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001360 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1361 *
1362 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1363 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1364 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1365 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1366 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1367 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001368 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1369 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1370 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1371 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1372 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1373 * algorithm.
1374 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1375 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1376 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1377 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1378 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1379 * CCK frames.
1380 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001381 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1382 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1383 * the FCS at the end.
1384 *
1385 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1386 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1387 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1388 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1389 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1390 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001391 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001392 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001393 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1394 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1395 *
1396 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1397 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1398 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001399 *
1400 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1401 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1402 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1403 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1404 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001405 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1406 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1407 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1408 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1409 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001410 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1411 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1412 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301413 *
1414 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1415 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001416 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001417 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1418 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1419 *
1420 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1421 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1422 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1423 *
1424 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1425 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001426 *
1427 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1428 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001429 *
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001430 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS:
1431 * Hardware supports static spatial multiplexing powersave,
1432 * ie. can turn off all but one chain even on HT connections
1433 * that should be using more chains.
1434 *
1435 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS:
1436 * Hardware supports dynamic spatial multiplexing powersave,
1437 * ie. can turn off all but one chain and then wake the rest
1438 * up as required after, for example, rts/cts handshake.
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001439 *
1440 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1441 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1442 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1443 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301444 *
1445 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1446 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1447 * the stack.
1448 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001449 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001450 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1451 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
1452 * When this flag is set, signaling beacon-loss will cause an immediate
1453 * change to disassociated state.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001454 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001455 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1456 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1457 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001458 *
1459 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1460 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1461 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1462 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1463 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1464 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001465 *
1466 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1467 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1468 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1469 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1470 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1471 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001472 *
1473 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1474 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1475 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001476 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001477 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1478 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1479 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001480 *
1481 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1482 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1483 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1484 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001485 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001486 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1487 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1488 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001489 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1490 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1491 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001492 *
1493 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1494 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001495 */
1496enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001497 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001498 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1499 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001500 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1501 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001502 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001503 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001504 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001505 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1506 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1507 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1508 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1509 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1510 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001511 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001512 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS = 1<<15,
1513 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS = 1<<16,
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001514 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301515 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001516 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001517 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001518 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001519 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001520 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001521 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001522 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001523 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001524 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001525};
1526
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001527/**
1528 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001529 *
1530 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1531 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1532 *
1533 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1534 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1535 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001536 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1537 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001538 *
1539 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1540 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001541 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1542 * along with this structure.
1543 *
1544 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1545 *
1546 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1547 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1548 *
1549 * @channel_change_time: time (in microseconds) it takes to change channels.
1550 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001551 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001552 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001553 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001554 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001555 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001556 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001557 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001558 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1559 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1560 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001561 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1562 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1563 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001564 *
1565 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1566 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001567 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1568 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001569 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1570 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001571 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001572 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1573 * can handle.
1574 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1575 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001576 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001577 *
1578 * @napi_weight: weight used for NAPI polling. You must specify an
1579 * appropriate value here if a napi_poll operation is provided
1580 * by your driver.
Randy Dunlap858022a2011-03-18 09:33:02 -07001581 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001582 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1583 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1584 * aggregation.
1585 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1586 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1587 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001588 *
1589 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1590 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1591 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001592 *
1593 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1594 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001595 *
1596 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1597 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1598 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1599 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001600 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001601 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1602 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1603 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1604 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001605 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1606 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1607 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001608 *
1609 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1610 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1611 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1612 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1613 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1614 * neither enabled.
1615 *
1616 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1617 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1618 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001619 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001620struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001621 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001622 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001623 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001624 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001625 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001626 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001627 int channel_change_time;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001628 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001629 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001630 int chanctx_data_size;
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001631 int napi_weight;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001632 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001633 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001634 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001635 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001636 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001637 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001638 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001639 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001640 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001641 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001642 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001643 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001644 u8 uapsd_queues;
1645 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001646};
1647
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001648/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001649 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1650 *
1651 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1652 *
1653 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1654 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1655 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1656 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1657 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001658 *
1659 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001660 */
1661struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1662
1663/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001664 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1665 *
1666 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1667 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1668 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001669static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1670{
1671 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1672}
1673
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001674/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001675 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001676 *
1677 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1678 * @addr: the address to set
1679 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001680static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1681{
1682 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1683}
1684
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001685static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1686ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001687 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001688{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001689 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001690 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001691 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001692}
1693
1694static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1695ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001696 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001697{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001698 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001699 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001700 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001701}
1702
1703static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1704ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001705 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001706{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001707 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001708 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001709 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001710}
1711
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001712/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001713 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1714 * @hw: the hardware
1715 * @skb: the skb
1716 *
1717 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1718 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1719 */
1720void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1721
1722/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001723 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001724 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001725 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1726 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1727 *
1728 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1729 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001730 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1731 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1732 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001733 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1734 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1735 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001736 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1737 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1738 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1739 *
1740 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1741 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1742 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1743 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1744 *
1745 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1746 *
1747 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1748 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1749 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1750 * based on the receive flags.
1751 *
1752 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1753 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1754 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1755 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001756 *
1757 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1758 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1759 * handler.
1760 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001761 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001762 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1763 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001764 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001765 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001766 *
1767 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1768 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1769 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001770 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001771
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001772/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001773 * DOC: Powersave support
1774 *
1775 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1776 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001777 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1778 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1779 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1780 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1781 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1782 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1783 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1784 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001785 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001786 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1787 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1788 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001789 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1790 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001791 *
1792 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1793 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1794 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001795 *
1796 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1797 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1798 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1799 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001800 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1801 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001802 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001803 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001804 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1805 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1806 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1807 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1808 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1809 * periods.
1810 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001811 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001812 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1813 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1814 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1815 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1816 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1817 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1818 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1819 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1820 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1821 *
1822 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1823 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
1824 * uapsd paramater in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
1825 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1826 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1827 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1828 *
1829 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1830 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001831 */
1832
1833/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001834 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1835 *
1836 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08001837 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001838 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1839 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1840 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1841 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1842 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1843 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001844 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1845 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001846 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1847 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1848 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1849 *
1850 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1851 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1852 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1853 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1854 *
1855 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1856 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1857 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
1858 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
1859 * - a list of information element IDs
1860 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
1861 *
1862 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
1863 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
1864 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
1865 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
1866 * vendor information elements.
1867 *
1868 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
1869 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
1870 *
1871 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
1872 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
1873 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
1874 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
1875 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
1876 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
1877 *
1878 *
1879 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
1880 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
1881 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
1882 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
1883 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
1884 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
1885 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
1886 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
1887 *
1888 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
1889 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
1890 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001891 */
1892
1893/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001894 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
1895 *
1896 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
1897 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
1898 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
1899 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
1900 *
1901 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
1902 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
1903 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
1904 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
1905 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
1906 * hardware flags.
1907 *
1908 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
1909 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
1910 * turned off otherwise.
1911 *
1912 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
1913 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
1914 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
1915 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
1916 */
1917
1918/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001919 * DOC: Frame filtering
1920 *
1921 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
1922 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
1923 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
1924 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
1925 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
1926 *
1927 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
1928 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
1929 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
1930 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02001931 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
1932 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
1933 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
1934 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
1935 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
1936 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
1937 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001938 *
1939 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
1940 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
1941 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
1942 * or dropped.
1943 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01001944 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
1945 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
1946 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
1947 * the flag, but not clear it.
1948 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
1949 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
1950 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
1951 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
1952 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
1953 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
1954 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
1955 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001956 */
1957
1958/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02001959 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
1960 *
1961 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
1962 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
1963 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
1964 *
1965 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
1966 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
1967 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
1968 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
1969 * the driver code.
1970 *
1971 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
1972 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
1973 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
1974 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
1975 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
1976 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
1977 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
1978 *
1979 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
1980 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
1981 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
1982 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
1983 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
1984 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
1985 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
1986 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
1987 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
1988 * @sta_notify callback.
1989 *
1990 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
1991 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
1992 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
1993 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
1994 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
1995 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
1996 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01001997 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02001998 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
1999 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2000 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2001 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2002 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2003 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2004 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002005 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2006 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2007 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002008 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2009 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2010 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2011 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2012 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2013 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2014 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2015 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2016 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2017 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2018 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2019 *
2020 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2021 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2022 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2023 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2024 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2025 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2026 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2027 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2028 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2029 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2030 * to help the @more_data paramter is passed to tell the driver if
2031 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2032 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2033 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2034 *
2035 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2036 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2037 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2038 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2039 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002040 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002041 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2042 *
2043 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2044 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2045 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2046 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002047 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002048 */
2049
2050/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002051 * DOC: HW queue control
2052 *
2053 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2054 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2055 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2056 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2057 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2058 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2059 *
2060 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2061 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2062 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2063 *
2064 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2065 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2066 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2067 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2068 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2069 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2070 * the hardware queue.
2071 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2072 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2073 *
2074 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2075 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2076 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2077 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2078 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2079 *
2080 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2081 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2082 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2083 * off-channel queue: 9
2084 *
2085 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2086 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2087 *
2088 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2089 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2090 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2091 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2092 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2093 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2094 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2095 *
2096 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2097 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2098 *
2099 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2100 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2101 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2102 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2103 */
2104
2105/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002106 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2107 *
2108 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2109 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2110 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2111 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2112 *
2113 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2114 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2115 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2116 *
2117 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2118 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2119 * multicast address.
2120 *
2121 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2122 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2123 *
2124 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2125 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2126 *
2127 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2128 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2129 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2130 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2131 * honour this flag if possible.
2132 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002133 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002134 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002135 *
2136 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002137 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002138 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2139 * those addressed to this station.
2140 *
2141 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002142 */
2143enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2144 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2145 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2146 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2147 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2148 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2149 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2150 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002151 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002152 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002153};
2154
2155/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002156 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2157 *
2158 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2159 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002160 *
2161 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2162 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002163 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002164 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2165 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002166 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2167 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2168 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002169 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002170 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2171 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2172 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2173 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2174 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2175 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2176 * session is gone and removes the station.
2177 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2178 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2179 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2180 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002181 */
2182enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2183 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2184 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002185 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002186 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2187 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2188 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002189 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002190};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002191
2192/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002193 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2194 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002195 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2196 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002197 */
2198enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2199 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002200 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002201};
2202
2203/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002204 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2205 *
2206 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002207 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2208 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2209 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002210 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002211 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2212 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2213 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002214 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2215 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002216 */
2217enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2218 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2219 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002220 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002221 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002222};
2223
2224/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002225 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2226 *
2227 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2228 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2229 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2230 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2231 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2232 *
2233 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2234 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2235 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2236 */
2237enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2238 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2239 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2240};
2241
2242/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002243 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2244 *
2245 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2246 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2247 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2248 *
2249 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2250 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2251 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002252 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002253 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002254 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002255 *
2256 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2257 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2258 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2259 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2260 * or zero.
2261 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2262 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2263 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002264 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002265 *
2266 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2267 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2268 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2269 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002270 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2271 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002272 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002273 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002274 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2275 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2276 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2277 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2278 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002279 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2280 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2281 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2282 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002283 *
2284 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2285 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2286 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2287 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2288 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2289 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002290 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2291 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2292 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2293 * in suspend().
2294 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002295 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002296 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002297 * and @stop must be implemented.
2298 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2299 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2300 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2301 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2302 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002303 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002304 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002305 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2306 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2307 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2308 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2309 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2310 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002311 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2312 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2313 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2314 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2315 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2316 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2317 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002318 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002319 *
2320 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2321 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002322 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002323 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002324 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002325 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2326 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2327 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2328 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2329 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002330 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2331 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002332 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002333 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2334 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2335 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2336 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002337 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2338 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002339 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002340 *
Alexander Bondar488b3662013-02-11 14:56:29 +02002341 * @set_multicast_list: Configure the device's interface specific RX multicast
2342 * filter. This callback is optional. This callback must be atomic.
2343 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002344 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002345 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002346 *
2347 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002348 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2349 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002350 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002351 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002352 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002353 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002354 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2355 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2356 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002357 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002358 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002359 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2360 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2361 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2362 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2363 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2364 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002365 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2366 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2367 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2368 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002369 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002370 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002371 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2372 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002373 * that power save is disabled.
2374 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2375 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2376 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2377 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2378 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2379 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2380 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002381 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002382 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002383 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2384 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2385 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2386 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2387 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2388 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2389 * The callback can sleep.
2390 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002391 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2392 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2393 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2394 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2395 *
2396 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
2397 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002398 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2399 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002400 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002401 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002402 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2403 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2404 * this notification.
2405 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002406 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002407 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2408 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002409 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002410 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002411 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2412 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2413 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002414 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002415 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002416 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2417 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2418 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2419 * The callback can sleep.
2420 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002421 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002422 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002423 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002424 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2425 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2426 *
2427 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
2428 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2429 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302430 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2431 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2432 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2433 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2434 *
2435 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2436 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2437 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002438 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002439 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2440 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2441 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002442 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002443 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2444 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2445 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2446 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
2447 * up the list of states.
2448 * The callback can sleep.
2449 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002450 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2451 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2452 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2453 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2454 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2455 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2456 * Must be atomic.
2457 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002458 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002459 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002460 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002461 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002462 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002463 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002464 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002465 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002466 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002467 *
2468 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002469 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002470 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002471 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002472 *
2473 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2474 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2475 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2476 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002477 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002478 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002479 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2480 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2481 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002482 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002483 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002484 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002485 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2486 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2487 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2488 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002489 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002490 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002491 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2492 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002493 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2494 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2495 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2496 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2497 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2498 * - TX: 1.....7
2499 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2500 * - TX: 8..1...
2501 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2502 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2503 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2504 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2505 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002506 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002507 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002508 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002509 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2510 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002511 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2512 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2513 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002514 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002515 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002516 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2517 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
2518 * accordingly. This callback is not required and may sleep.
2519 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002520 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2521 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002522 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002523 *
2524 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002525 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2526 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2527 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2528 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
2529 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002530 *
2531 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2532 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2533 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2534 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002535 *
2536 * @napi_poll: Poll Rx queue for incoming data frames.
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002537 *
2538 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2539 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2540 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2541 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2542 *
2543 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002544 *
2545 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2546 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2547 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2548 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2549 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2550 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002551 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002552 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2553 * must be accepted in this case.
2554 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002555 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2556 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002557 *
2558 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2559 *
2560 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302561 *
2562 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2563 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302564 *
2565 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2566 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2567 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002568 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2569 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002570 *
2571 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2572 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2573 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2574 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
2575 * Note that if the @more_data paramter is %false the driver must check
2576 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2577 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2578 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2579 * more-data bit must always be set.
2580 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2581 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002582 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2583 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2584 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2585 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2586 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2587 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002588 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2589 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2590 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002591 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2592 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002593 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002594 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002595 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002596 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2597 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2598 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002599 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002600 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2601 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2602 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2603 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002604 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002605 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002606 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2607 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2608 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002609 *
2610 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2611 *
2612 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2613 *
2614 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2615 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2616 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002617 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2618 * and can sleep.
2619 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002620 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2621 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2622 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2623 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2624 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2625 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2626 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2627 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2628 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2629 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2630 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2631 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002632 *
2633 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2634 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2635 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2636 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2637 * channel context with different settings
2638 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2639 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2640 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2641 * unbound from vif.
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002642 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2643 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2644 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2645 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2646 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2647 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2648 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002649 *
2650 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2651 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002652 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2653 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2654 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2655 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002656 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2657 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2658 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002659 *
2660 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2661 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2662 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
2663 * decremented, and when they reach zero the driver must call
2664 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2665 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
2666 * zero using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
2667 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
2668 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002669 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002670struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002671 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2672 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2673 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002674 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002675 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002676#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2677 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2678 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002679 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002680#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002681 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002682 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002683 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2684 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002685 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002686 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002688 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002689 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2691 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2692 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002693
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002694 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2695 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2696
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002697 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002698 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002699 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2700 unsigned int changed_flags,
2701 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002702 u64 multicast);
Alexander Bondar488b3662013-02-11 14:56:29 +02002703 void (*set_multicast_list)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2704 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool allmulti,
2705 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
2706
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002707 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2708 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002709 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002710 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04002711 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002712 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01002713 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2714 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2715 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2716 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002717 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2718 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2719 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002720 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2721 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02002722 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01002723 struct cfg80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002724 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2725 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002726 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2727 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2728 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
2729 struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies *ies);
2730 void (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002732 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2733 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002734 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2735 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002736 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2737 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002738 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002739 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002740 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2741 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2742 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2743 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302744#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2745 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2746 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2747 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2748 struct dentry *dir);
2749 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2750 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2751 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2752 struct dentry *dir);
2753#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002754 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002755 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002756 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2757 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2758 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2759 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002760 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2762 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2763 u32 changed);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02002764 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02002765 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002766 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03002767 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2768 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2769 u64 tsf);
2770 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002771 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002772 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01002773 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002774 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002775 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2776 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02002777 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2778 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002779 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002780 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002781#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002782 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2783 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002784 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2785 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2786 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002787#endif
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002788 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002789 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2790 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002791 int (*napi_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int budget);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09002792 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2793 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002794
2795 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02002796 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002797 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002798 int duration,
2799 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002800 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002801 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2802 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2803 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302804 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302805 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2806 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002807 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02002808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002809 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002810
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002811 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2812 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2813 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2814 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2815 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002816 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2817 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2818 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2819 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2820 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002821
2822 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
2824 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2825 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2826 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
2827 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2829 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002830 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2831 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002832
2833 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002835
2836 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2837 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2838 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2839 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2840 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2841 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
2842 u32 changed);
2843 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2844 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2845 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2846 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2847 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2848 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002849
2850 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002851
2852#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
2853 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2855 struct inet6_dev *idev);
2856#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002857 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2859 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002860};
2861
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002862/**
2863 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
2864 *
2865 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
2866 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
2867 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
2868 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
2869 * @priv_data_len.
2870 *
2871 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
2872 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002873 *
2874 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002875 */
2876struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
2877 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops);
2878
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002879/**
2880 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
2881 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01002882 * You must call this function before any other functions in
2883 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
2884 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002885 *
2886 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002887 *
2888 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002889 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002890int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2891
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01002892/**
2893 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
2894 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
2895 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
2896 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
2897 */
2898struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
2899 int throughput;
2900 int blink_time;
2901};
2902
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01002903/**
2904 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
2905 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
2906 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
2907 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
2908 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
2909 */
2910enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
2911 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
2912 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
2913 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
2914};
2915
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002916#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07002917char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2918char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2919char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2920char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2921char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2922 unsigned int flags,
2923 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
2924 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002925#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002926/**
2927 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
2928 *
2929 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
2930 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
2931 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
2932 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
2933 *
2934 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002935 *
2936 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002937 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002938static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
2939{
2940#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
2941 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
2942#else
2943 return NULL;
2944#endif
2945}
2946
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002947/**
2948 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
2949 *
2950 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
2951 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
2952 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
2953 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
2954 *
2955 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002956 *
2957 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002958 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002959static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
2960{
2961#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
2962 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
2963#else
2964 return NULL;
2965#endif
2966}
2967
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01002968/**
2969 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
2970 *
2971 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
2972 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
2973 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
2974 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
2975 *
2976 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002977 *
2978 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01002979 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02002980static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
2981{
2982#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
2983 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
2984#else
2985 return NULL;
2986#endif
2987}
2988
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01002989/**
2990 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
2991 *
2992 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
2993 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
2994 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
2995 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
2996 *
2997 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002998 *
2999 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003000 */
3001static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3002{
3003#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3004 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3005#else
3006 return NULL;
3007#endif
3008}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003009
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003010/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003011 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3012 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003013 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003014 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3015 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3016 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003017 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3018 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3019 *
3020 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003021 */
3022static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003023ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003024 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3025 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3026{
3027#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003028 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003029 blink_table_len);
3030#else
3031 return NULL;
3032#endif
3033}
3034
3035/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003036 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3037 *
3038 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3039 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3040 *
3041 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3042 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003043void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3044
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003045/**
3046 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3047 *
3048 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3049 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003050 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003051 *
3052 * @hw: the hardware to free
3053 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003054void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3055
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003056/**
3057 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3058 *
3059 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3060 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3061 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3062 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3063 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3064 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3065 *
3066 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3067 */
3068void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3069
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003070/** ieee80211_napi_schedule - schedule NAPI poll
3071 *
3072 * Use this function to schedule NAPI polling on a device.
3073 *
3074 * @hw: the hardware to start polling
3075 */
3076void ieee80211_napi_schedule(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3077
3078/** ieee80211_napi_complete - complete NAPI polling
3079 *
3080 * Use this function to finish NAPI polling on a device.
3081 *
3082 * @hw: the hardware to stop polling
3083 */
3084void ieee80211_napi_complete(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3085
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003086/**
3087 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3088 *
3089 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003090 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3091 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3092 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3093 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003094 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003095 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003096 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3097 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003098 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3099 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003100 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003101 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003102 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003103 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3104 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003105 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003106void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003107
3108/**
3109 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3110 *
3111 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003112 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3113 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003114 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003115 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3116 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003117 *
3118 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3119 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003120 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003121void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003122
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003123/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003124 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3125 *
3126 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3127 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3128 *
3129 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003130 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3131 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003132 *
3133 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3134 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3135 */
3136static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3137 struct sk_buff *skb)
3138{
3139 local_bh_disable();
3140 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3141 local_bh_enable();
3142}
3143
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003144/**
3145 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3146 *
3147 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3148 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3149 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3150 *
3151 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3152 *
3153 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3154 * each other.
3155 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003156 * @sta: currently connected sta
3157 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003158 *
3159 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003160 */
3161int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3162
3163/**
3164 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3165 * (in process context)
3166 *
3167 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3168 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3169 * applies.
3170 *
3171 * @sta: currently connected sta
3172 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003173 *
3174 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003175 */
3176static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3177 bool start)
3178{
3179 int ret;
3180
3181 local_bh_disable();
3182 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3183 local_bh_enable();
3184
3185 return ret;
3186}
3187
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003188/*
3189 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3190 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3191 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003192#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003193
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003194/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003195 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003196 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003197 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3198 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003199 *
3200 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003201 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3202 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003203 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003204 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3205 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3206 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3207 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3208 *
3209 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3210 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3211 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3212 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3213 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3214 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3215 *
3216 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3217 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3218 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3219 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3220 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003221 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003222void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3223 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003224
3225/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003226 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3227 *
3228 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3229 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3230 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3231 *
3232 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3233 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3234 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3235 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3236 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3237 */
3238void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3239 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3240 struct sk_buff *skb,
3241 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3242 int max_rates);
3243
3244/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003245 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3246 *
3247 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3248 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3249 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3250 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003251 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3252 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003253 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003254 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3255 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003256 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003257 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3258 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003259 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003260void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003261 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003262
3263/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003264 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3265 *
3266 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3267 *
3268 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3269 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3270 * for a single hardware.
3271 *
3272 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3273 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3274 */
3275static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3276 struct sk_buff *skb)
3277{
3278 local_bh_disable();
3279 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3280 local_bh_enable();
3281}
3282
3283/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003284 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003285 *
3286 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3287 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3288 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003289 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3290 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003291 *
3292 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3293 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003294 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003295void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003296 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003297
3298/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003299 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3300 *
3301 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3302 * connected STA.
3303 *
3304 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3305 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3306 */
3307void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3308
3309/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003310 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3311 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003312 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003313 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3314 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3315 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3316 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3317 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3318 *
3319 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3320 * obtain the beacon frame/template.
3321 *
3322 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3323 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
3324 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function
3325 * before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
3326 *
3327 * If the beacon frames are generated by the device, then the driver
3328 * must use the returned beacon as the template and change the TIM IE
3329 * according to the current DTIM parameters/TIM bitmap.
3330 *
3331 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003332 *
3333 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003334 */
3335struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3336 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3337 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3338
3339/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003340 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3341 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003342 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003343 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003344 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003345 *
3346 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003347 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003348static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3349 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3350{
3351 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3352}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003353
3354/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003355 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3356 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3357 *
3358 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
3359 * announcement hit zero, this function must be called by the driver to
3360 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3361 */
3362void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3363
3364/**
3365 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached zero
3366 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3367 *
3368 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3369 */
3370bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3371
3372
3373/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003374 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3375 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3376 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3377 *
3378 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3379 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3380 *
3381 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003382 *
3383 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003384 */
3385struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3386 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3387
3388/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003389 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3390 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3391 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3392 *
3393 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3394 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3395 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3396 *
3397 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3398 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003399 *
3400 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003401 */
3402struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3403 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3404
3405/**
3406 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3407 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3408 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3409 *
3410 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3411 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3412 * BSSID and address is used.
3413 *
3414 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3415 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003416 *
3417 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003418 */
3419struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3420 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3421
3422/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003423 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3424 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3425 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3426 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3427 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003428 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003429 *
3430 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3431 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003432 *
3433 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003434 */
3435struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3437 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003438 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003439
3440/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003441 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3442 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003443 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003444 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3445 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003446 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003447 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3448 *
3449 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3450 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3451 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3452 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3453 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003454void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003455 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003456 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003457 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3458
3459/**
3460 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3461 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003462 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003463 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003464 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003465 *
3466 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3467 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3468 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003469 *
3470 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003471 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003472__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3473 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003474 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003475
3476/**
3477 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3478 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003479 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003480 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3481 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003482 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003483 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3484 *
3485 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3486 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3487 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3488 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3489 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003490void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003492 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003493 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003494 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3495
3496/**
3497 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3498 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003500 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003501 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003502 *
3503 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3504 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3505 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003506 *
3507 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003508 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003509__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003511 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003512 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003513
3514/**
3515 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3516 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003517 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003518 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003519 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003520 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003521 *
3522 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3523 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003524 *
3525 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003526 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003527__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003529 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003530 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003531 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003532
3533/**
3534 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3535 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003536 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003537 *
3538 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3539 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3540 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3541 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003542 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3543 *
3544 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3545 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003546 *
3547 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3548 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3549 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3550 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3551 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3552 * use common code for all beacons.
3553 */
3554struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003555ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003556
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003557/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003558 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3559 *
3560 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3561 *
3562 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3563 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3564 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3565 */
3566void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3567 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3568
3569/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003570 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003571 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003572 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3573 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003574 *
3575 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003576 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3577 * with this P1K
3578 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003579 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003580static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3581 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3582{
3583 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3584 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3585 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3586
3587 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3588}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003589
3590/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02003591 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3592 *
3593 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3594 * and transmitter address.
3595 *
3596 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3597 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3598 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3599 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3600 */
3601void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3602 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3603
3604/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003605 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3606 *
3607 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3608 * in the packet.
3609 *
3610 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3611 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3612 * encrypted with this key
3613 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3614 */
3615void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3616 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003617
3618/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03003619 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3620 *
3621 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3622 * previously installed master key.
3623 *
3624 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3625 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3626 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3627 */
3628void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3629 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3630
3631/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02003632 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3633 *
3634 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3635 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3636 * reverse order than in packet)
3637 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3638 * reverse order than in packet)
3639 */
3640struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3641 union {
3642 struct {
3643 u32 iv32;
3644 u16 iv16;
3645 } tkip;
3646 struct {
3647 u8 pn[6];
3648 } ccmp;
3649 struct {
3650 u8 pn[6];
3651 } aes_cmac;
3652 };
3653};
3654
3655/**
3656 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3657 *
3658 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3659 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3660 *
3661 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3662 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3663 * offloaded to the device.
3664 *
3665 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3666 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3667 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3668 */
3669void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3670 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3671
3672/**
3673 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3674 *
3675 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3676 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3677 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3678 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3679 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3680 *
3681 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3682 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3683 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3684 *
3685 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3686 * can be done concurrently.
3687 */
3688void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3689 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3690
3691/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02003692 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3693 *
3694 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3695 * @seq: new sequence data
3696 *
3697 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3698 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3699 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3700 * ARP requests.
3701 *
3702 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3703 * can be done concurrently.
3704 */
3705void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3706 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3707
3708/**
3709 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3710 *
3711 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3712 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3713 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3714 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3715 * @seq: new sequence data
3716 *
3717 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
3718 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
3719 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
3720 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
3721 *
3722 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3723 * can be done concurrently.
3724 */
3725void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3726 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3727
3728/**
3729 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
3730 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3731 *
3732 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
3733 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
3734 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
3735 *
3736 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
3737 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
3738 */
3739void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3740
3741/**
3742 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
3743 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
3744 * @keyconf: new key data
3745 *
3746 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
3747 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
3748 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
3749 *
3750 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
3751 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
3752 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
3753 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
3754 *
3755 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
3756 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
3757 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
3758 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
3759 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
3760 * of the reconfiguration.
3761 *
3762 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
3763 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
3764 *
3765 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
3766 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
3767 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
3768 * the key that's being replaced.
3769 */
3770struct ieee80211_key_conf *
3771ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3772 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3773
3774/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003775 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
3776 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
3777 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
3778 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
3779 * @gfp: allocation flags
3780 */
3781void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
3782 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
3783
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003784/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003785 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
3786 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3787 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3788 *
3789 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3790 */
3791void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3792
3793/**
3794 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
3795 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3796 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3797 *
3798 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3799 */
3800void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3801
3802/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003803 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
3804 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3805 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3806 *
3807 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003808 *
3809 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003810 */
3811
3812int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3813
3814/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003815 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
3816 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3817 *
3818 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3819 */
3820void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3821
3822/**
3823 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
3824 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3825 *
3826 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3827 */
3828void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3829
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003830/**
3831 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
3832 *
3833 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
3834 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02003835 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
3836 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003837 *
3838 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003839 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003840 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003841void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003842
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003843/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003844 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
3845 *
3846 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
3847 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
3848 *
3849 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3850 */
3851void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3852
3853/**
3854 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
3855 *
3856 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
3857 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
3858 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
3859 * while associating, for instance.
3860 *
3861 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3862 */
3863void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3864
3865/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003866 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
3867 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
3868 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
3869 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
3870 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
3871 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3872 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
3873 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3874 */
3875enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
3876 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
3877 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
3878};
3879
3880/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003881 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003882 *
3883 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3884 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003885 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
3886 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
3887 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003888 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003889 *
3890 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003891 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003892 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003893 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3894 */
3895void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003896 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003897 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003899 void *data);
3900
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003901/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003902 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
3903 *
3904 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3905 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
3906 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
3907 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003908 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003909 *
3910 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003911 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003912 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
3913 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3914 */
3915void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003916 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003917 void (*iterator)(void *data,
3918 u8 *mac,
3919 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
3920 void *data);
3921
3922/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04003923 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3924 *
3925 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
3926 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
3927 *
3928 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
3929 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
3930 */
3931void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
3932
3933/**
3934 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3935 *
3936 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
3937 * workqueue.
3938 *
3939 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
3940 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
3941 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
3942 */
3943void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3944 struct delayed_work *dwork,
3945 unsigned long delay);
3946
3947/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003948 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003949 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003950 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05303951 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07003952 *
3953 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003954 *
3955 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
3956 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
3957 * will be managed by the mac80211.
3958 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05303959int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
3960 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003961
3962/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003963 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003964 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003965 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
3966 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
3967 *
3968 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02003969 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
3970 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003971 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003972void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003973 u16 tid);
3974
3975/**
3976 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003977 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003978 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07003979 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02003980 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003981 *
3982 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
3983 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
3984 * will be managed by the mac80211.
3985 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02003986int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003987
3988/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003989 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003990 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003991 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
3992 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
3993 *
3994 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02003995 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
3996 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003997 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003998void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003999 u16 tid);
4000
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004001/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004002 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4003 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004004 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004005 * @addr: station's address
4006 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004007 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4008 *
4009 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004010 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4011 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004012struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004013 const u8 *addr);
4014
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004015/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004016 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004017 *
4018 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004019 * @addr: remote station's address
4020 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004021 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004022 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4023 *
4024 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004025 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4026 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004027 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4028 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4029 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4030 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4031 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4032 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4033 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004034 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004035 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004036 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004037struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4038 const u8 *addr,
4039 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004040
4041/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004042 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4043 * @hw: the hardware
4044 * @pubsta: the station
4045 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4046 *
4047 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4048 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4049 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4050 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4051 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4052 *
4053 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4054 * manner.
4055 *
4056 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4057 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4058 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4059 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4060 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4061 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4062 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4063 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4064 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4065 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4066 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4067 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4068 * woke up while blocked or not.
4069 */
4070void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4071 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4072
4073/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004074 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4075 * @pubsta: the station
4076 *
4077 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4078 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4079 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4080 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4081 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004082 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4083 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4084 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4085 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4086 *
4087 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4088 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4089 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4090 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004091 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004092void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004093
4094/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004095 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4096 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4097 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4098 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4099 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4100 *
4101 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4102 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4103 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4104 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4105 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4106 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004107 *
4108 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4109 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4110 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004111 */
4112void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4113 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4114 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4115 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4116 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4117 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4118 void *data),
4119 void *iter_data);
4120
4121/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004122 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4123 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4124 * @iter: iterator function
4125 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4126 *
4127 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4128 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4129 * places while calling into the driver.
4130 *
4131 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4132 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4133 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004134 *
4135 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4136 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4137 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4138 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004139 */
4140void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4141 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4142 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4143 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4144 void *data),
4145 void *iter_data);
4146
4147/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004148 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4149 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4150 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4151 *
4152 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4153 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4154 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4155 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4156 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004157 * %NULL.
4158 *
4159 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004160 */
4161struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4162 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4163
4164/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004165 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4166 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004167 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004168 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004169 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004170 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004171 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4172 */
4173void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004174
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004175/**
4176 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4177 *
4178 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4179 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004180 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004181 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4182 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004183 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4184 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004185 *
4186 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4187 * without connection recovery attempts.
4188 */
4189void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4190
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004191/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004192 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4193 *
4194 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4195 *
4196 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4197 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4198 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4199 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4200 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4201 *
4202 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4203 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4204 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4205 * disconnect normally later.
4206 *
4207 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4208 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4209 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4210 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4211 */
4212void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4213
4214/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004215 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4216 * rssi threshold triggered
4217 *
4218 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4219 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4220 * @gfp: context flags
4221 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004222 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004223 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4224 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4225 */
4226void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4227 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4228 gfp_t gfp);
4229
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004230/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004231 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4232 *
4233 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4234 */
4235void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4236
4237/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004238 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4239 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4240 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4241 *
4242 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4243 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4244 */
4245void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4246
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004247/**
4248 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4249 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004250 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004251 *
4252 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4253 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4254 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4255 */
4256void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4257 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4258
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004259/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004260 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4261 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4262 */
4263void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4264
4265/**
4266 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4267 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4268 */
4269void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4270
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004271/**
4272 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4273 *
4274 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4275 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4276 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4277 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4278 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4279 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4280 *
4281 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4282 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4283 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4284 */
4285void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4286 const u8 *addr);
4287
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004288/**
4289 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4290 *
4291 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4292 * buffer.
4293 *
4294 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4295 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4296 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4297 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4298 */
4299void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4300
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004301/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004302
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004303/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004304 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004305 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004306 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4307 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4308 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004309 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4310 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004311 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4312 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4313 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4314 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4315 * RTS threshold
4316 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4317 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004318 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004319 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4320 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004321 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004322 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004323 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004324 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004325struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4326 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4327 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4328 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4329 struct sk_buff *skb;
4330 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4331 bool rts, short_preamble;
4332 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004333 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004334 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004335 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004336};
4337
4338struct rate_control_ops {
4339 struct module *module;
4340 const char *name;
4341 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004342 void (*free)(void *priv);
4343
4344 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4345 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004346 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004347 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304348 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004349 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004350 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4351 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004352 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4353 void *priv_sta);
4354
4355 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4356 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4357 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004358 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4359 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004360
4361 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4362 struct dentry *dir);
4363 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
4364};
4365
4366static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4367 enum ieee80211_band band,
4368 int index)
4369{
4370 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4371}
4372
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004373/**
4374 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4375 *
4376 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4377 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4378 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4379 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4380 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4381 * not null.
4382 *
4383 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4384 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4385 *
4386 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4387 * that this may be null.
4388 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4389 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4390 */
4391bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4392 void *priv_sta,
4393 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4394
4395
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004396static inline s8
4397rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4398 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4399{
4400 int i;
4401
4402 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4403 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4404 return i;
4405
4406 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004407 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004408
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004409 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004410 return 0;
4411}
4412
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004413static inline
4414bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4415 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4416{
4417 unsigned int i;
4418
4419 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4420 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4421 return true;
4422 return false;
4423}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004424
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004425/**
4426 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4427 *
4428 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4429 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4430 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4431 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4432 *
4433 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4434 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4435 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4436 */
4437int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4438 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4439 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4440
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004441int ieee80211_rate_control_register(struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4442void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4443
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004444static inline bool
4445conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4446{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004447 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004448}
4449
4450static inline bool
4451conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4452{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004453 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4454 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004455}
4456
4457static inline bool
4458conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4459{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004460 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4461 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004462}
4463
4464static inline bool
4465conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4466{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004467 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004468}
4469
4470static inline bool
4471conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4472{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004473 return conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004474}
4475
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004476static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4477ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4478{
4479 if (p2p) {
4480 switch (type) {
4481 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4482 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4483 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4484 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4485 default:
4486 break;
4487 }
4488 }
4489 return type;
4490}
4491
4492static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4493ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4494{
4495 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4496}
4497
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004498void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4499 int rssi_min_thold,
4500 int rssi_max_thold);
4501
4502void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004503
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004504/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004505 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004506 *
4507 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4508 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004509 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4510 *
4511 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4512 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004513 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004514int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4515
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004516/**
4517 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4518 * @vif: virtual interface
4519 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4520 * @gfp: allocation flags
4521 *
4522 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4523 */
4524void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4525 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4526 gfp_t gfp);
4527
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004528#endif /* MAC80211_H */